Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Add more detailed modelling elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Add basic MEP elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing engineering workflows. and plumbing fixtures. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. fixtures. Germany. electrical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as duct. and piping. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. 3 .

After completing each exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. So. such as templates and families. when you add ductwork. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and tags. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. views. your Training folder may be in a different location. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you learn where the training files are located. annotations. You do not design entire systems. Create schedules. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. however. and sheets to document the project. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. For example. In this exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Contact your CAD manager for more information. is located and accessed in the training files location. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Metric file names have an _m suffix. On the Contents tab. NOTE Depending on your installation. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. to provide a richer and more finished design. When you install the training files as instructed. When you open a training file. you can choose to save your work. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. However. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. For example. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. templates. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Create detail views. Metric: files for users working with metric units. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. as well as how to open and save them.

and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For example. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. you are prompted to save the changes. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt and make changes. verify that Project Files (*. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. click ➤ Save As. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. scroll down. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in.rvt. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 3 In the right pane. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. For File name. the Open dialog displays. and click Save. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and you can open any supported file type. enter the new file name. For Files of type. double-click Imperial or Metric. select the folder in which to save the new file.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and click the Training Files icon.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the floor or roof remains connected. hence. every drawing sheet. the hierarchy of elements. and plans. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. As you work in drawing and schedule views. 2D and 3D view. the operation of the software is parametric. quantities. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. schedules. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You learn the terminology. and schedules required for a building project. drawing sheets. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. scope. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In the Revit MEP model. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. sections. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. If you move the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. ■ ■ 7 . and phases when you need it.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawings. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.

filled regions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. ducts. sinks. ducts. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. walls and ceilings are hosts. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. They display in relevant views of the design. levels. and keynotes are annotation elements. sprinklers. and reference planes are datum elements. grids.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components. When you change something. boilers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. They help to describe or document the design. For example. tags. Examples include detail lines. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sinks. tags. For example. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. dimensions. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. sprinklers. boilers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper.

and types. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . In Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. Most often. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. This information includes components used to design the model. North . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Often. for example. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. top of wall. section views. you do nothing to establish these relationships. If you can draw. By using a single project file. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. families. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and so forth).This implementation provides flexibility for designers. from geometry to construction data. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Project: In Revit MEP. However. floors. schedules. and ceilings. elevation views. you must be in a section or elevation view. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. To place levels. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. or bottom of foundation. programming is not required. first floor. views of the project. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. such as roofs. In other cases. For example. you can explicitly control them. some terms are unique to Revit MEP.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.

There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. showing. Then experiment with them. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. identical use. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. System families include ducts. and similar graphical representation. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and wires. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. such as a 30” X 42” title block. With a few clicks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). pipes. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Unlike system and standard component families. hiding. or layer the views to see only the one on top.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. A type can also be a style. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. However. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. System families can be transferred between projects. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. You can also display several project views at one time.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To return the panel to the ribbon. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.

select the tool first. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and for switching views. project and system parameters.. and CAD files. and settings. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. architect-specific tools.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.

To keep a panel expanded. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information. For example. when adding duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. By default. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls.

(Save) save the current drawing with a new name..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. click. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing.

to. publish the current project. annotation. family. saves a current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. and Walkthrough. click. To enable or disable a tool item. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar... (Licensing) close the file. (Print) access product and license information. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. provides views including Default 3D.On the application menu. but is not enabled by default.. Camera. annotation. or template file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.

Clipboard. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Modify. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. To hide the Status Bar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Clear the Status Bar check mark. When you are using a command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. check the Status Bar. Group. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. workshared components.To undo or redo a series of operations. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. displaying the same information. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. In addition. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. This displays the command history in a list. repeat the command. However. When you are highlighting an element or component. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type. Place a Wall.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. for example. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. There are several ways to access zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. In the following steps. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example.

use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 9 To display SteeringWheels. In the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click . To modify or add snap increments. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the view zooms in on the selected area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.

press ESC. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. As you move the mouse. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options. Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. and click tin the Options dialog.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. as shown. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and open Level 2 . bottoms. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Small blue dots. and select the duct. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. 2 Enter ZR.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. These are the drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display along the ends.HVAC Plan . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.

or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move.

such as Move and Copy. as shown. and drag it to the left as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. for example. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position. In this case. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. The duct is moved to the new position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 11 With the duct already selected. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Some commands.

Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice. Select Mechanical . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. For example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 6 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. under Create new. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Finally. select Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. and modify system settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you learn how to start a project from a template.rte template. use copy/monitor. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. the default building levels and standard views. link files. system families. and click Open. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as coordination review and interference checking. In that case. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Training files. You can choose from several templates. click Browse. such as the default project units and settings. and geometry from the starting template. You can either select a template from the template library. 27 . create and manage views. New projects inherit all the families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. under Template file. 5 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. settings. and loadable families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.

Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. click (Browse). click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. review the construction materials listed. for Energy Data. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under Energy Analysis. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 8 In the drawing area. for City. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. select Level 1. Click OK twice. select Project template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. NH. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Click Cancel. select School or University. If you want to use a template other than the default. select Manchester. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Edit. Click OK. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. In the Choose Template dialog. For example. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. you can select it now. and open North. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ Under Create new. When you select the material.rte template and click Open. (Browse). select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.7 In the Project Browser. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. For Location. navigate to Imperial Templates. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ For Building Construction. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 Using the same method. create another new project using the Construction template.

For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Rectangular. under Duct Settings. and 12 1/2". 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. 24 In the right pane. wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 10 1/2". 22 In the right pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. piping. plumbing. After standard settings have been established for an organization.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 26 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Identity Data. and 5 1/2". 11 1/2". 27 Click OK. 4 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. for 3 1/2". 4 1/2". click Wiring. click Round. and fire protection systems. under Pipe Settings. for 3 1/2". click Sizes. for 3/4". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Views. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. power distribution systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 5 1/2". 23 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Categories. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Click OK twice.rfa and click Open. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 33 Click OK.

Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.rvt. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Sub-Discipline. 38 Close the file. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Family and Type. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.Origin to Origin. 4 In the New Project dialog. sheets. To enable this coordination. families. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. In addition. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. under Template file. under Create new. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 5 Click OK. Notice that the file is saved as a template. For Sort by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Training. select Associated Level. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Project. From the Positioning list. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Auto . and groups that are contained in a project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. For Then by. Click Open. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. For Then by. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. and change the name to My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. and Import dialogs.11 In the Places dialog. and select it as the library path. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. click (Add Value). and click OK twice. templates. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. click the My Library icon. 15 Under Library Name. and click (Browse). click My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.

20 Click ➤ Options. specify the new location here. click OK. This path is determined during installation. 12 Create a new project using the default template.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. select Ignore words in uppercase. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click Edit. If you work in a large office. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 14 Click in the drawing area. 27 Click OK. If you want to relocate this path. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click Places. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 Select My Library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 5 In the text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. such as bump maps. view the current path. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 9 In the text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. click the Spelling tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and decal image files. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 11 In the Options dialog. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 3 Under Settings.

delete sheetmtl-CU. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click the Spelling tab. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. 25 Close the file without saving it. 19 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. you modify snap settings. click Browse. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.. 20 Under Settings.rte. In this exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. under Dimension Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. click Training Files. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Template file. click OK. 23 In the text editor. click Restore Defaults. work with snapping turned off. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and enter 1 . You can turn snap settings on and off.17 In the Spelling dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 24 In the Options dialog. click Close. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. click Edit.

If it does not. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 10 On the Options Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. For example. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and move the cursor to the right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM. While sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This is the increment that you added previously. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog.7 Under Object Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse. deselect Chain. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom out until it does so.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. with or without saving it. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 25 Click OK. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 26 Close the file. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. it will snap to the endpoints.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and delete the value 1’ . and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and the wall edges. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right.. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.

43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

After applying a color scheme to the zones. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. However. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After finishing each exercise. and then you create a plenum level.autodesk. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. In this exercise. At the end of the tutorial. duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. If the tutorial training files are not present. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). This system consists of a cooling tower. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. 45 . To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you design a mechanical system for an office building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. you first plan the system. methodology. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

ceilings. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Next. select Room Bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. not in the MEP training file. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. NOTE When working with a linked file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to select it. and after the linked model highlights. In this section. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.rvt. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you add a level for plenums.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. roof. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Constraints. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.Space Plan is highlighted. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.6 In the Project Browser. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. The new level is placed. For Offset. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Preparing Spaces | 47 . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and double-click West . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Plan View Types. 9 On the Draw panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.MEP. enter 8'. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 16 Press Esc. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.

for Top.Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for Default View Template. select Level Above (Level 3). The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Under View Depth. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for View Range. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. In the next exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. and then place spaces in various types of areas. enter an Offset of 1' 0". In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For View Classification. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. select MEP . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. 20 In the Project Browser. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. click Edit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Scale. ■ Click OK twice. select Design. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . However. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. select Plenum Plan. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Cut plane. and for Offset. enter 0.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Under Extents. for Level. Under Identity Data. right-click Level 2 Plenum.

select New. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Space. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings). enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view. walls.rvt. For (Tag Location). select Level 2 Plenum. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 Select the space. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. enter 219. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 Click to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 51 . 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. For Offset. For Upper Limit. enter 0. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. click Training Files. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . indicating that it’s the active view. and then press Esc. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. select Level 3. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

change the space number to 216A. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. enter Corridor. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. In the schedule. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. and scroll to the newly placed space. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the floor plan. 11 Close the schedule view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. the plan view would have updated with the changes. double-click the space name.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Using the method learned previously.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase.

4 Press Esc. On the Options Bar. For Limit Offset. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. right-click. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. enter 0. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter Chase. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. and click Element Properties. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Identity Data. In the plan view. select Interior and Reference. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 6 Enter VG. 10 In the plan view. select the space. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. For Number. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Offset. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . select Level 3. enter 225PC. enter 4'. select Roof Level. and then click OK. for Name.

Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 15 Press Esc. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and maximize the view. 17 Type ZF.Space Plan. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. select Space Tag With Volume. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Loaded Tags. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. In the next exercises. All spaces in the view are tagged.Bounding elements (such as walls. and click OK. ceilings. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors.

After a space is placed in an area. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. which removes the space from the Default zone. click Reference. under Spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . indicating that it’s the active view. it is automatically added to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click View ➤ Zones. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and verify that All Disciplines is selected.rvt. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.

under Spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and Electrical 220 spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The graphic in the System Browser updates. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The Zone tool is active. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. click Training Files. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. under Energy Analysis. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. As you do this. indicating that it’s the active view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the Edit Zone tab displays. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Reference. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and modify the zone properties. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Using the Edit Zone tab.5 In the System Browser. select Computer Lab 222. you assign spaces to a zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Occupiable. Instruction 221. To display space reference lines. Next. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning is highlighted. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Finish Editing Zone. and a new zone is created. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that the space is occupiable.rvt. and click OK. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and verify the zones in the System Browser.

The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active. select HVAC Zones. Instruction.In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. 11 Close the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. enter 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.West . 9 In the System Browser. for Name. To display space reference lines. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.West . In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. expand 2 . You activated zone visibility in the views. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser.Zoning. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Identity Data. click Finish Editing Zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Spaces. In this exercise. click Reference. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Area B. indicating that it’s the active view.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and click OK. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.

5 Click in the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it. click in the Level 2 . zoom out.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Select Attached End.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 15 Press Esc.

rvt.Zoning to make it the active view. and zone information. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1 .Zoning view. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter Lounge . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Front. double-click the zone tag. you verify the building. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. for Name Value. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. on the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.East. space. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Click (Highlight). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. click (Isolate). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. Next. verify that Wireframe is selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. and select 109 Lounge. you isolate the space.

and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and in the People dialog. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. select 109 Lounge. select 1_South_Lounge. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select Lounge/Recreation. click . and then click OK. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. ■ ■ ■ Next. scroll down in the left pane. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and click OK. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Electrical Loads. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For People. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type.■ On the Details tab. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.

00 °F : 54. cooling air temperature. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. heating air temperature. For Cooling Information. For Heating Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.00 °F : 90. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This indicates the heating set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the cooling set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and other room-bounding components. Next. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. click (Shading). and humidification set point. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 74. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and air changes per hour. outdoor air per area. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.00 °F : N/A is specified. roofs. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 70.

For Offset. enter 0. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Number. Under Energy Analysis.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. open MEP . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. enter 212P. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. select Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. click Cancel. For Name. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. Because this is an unoccupied space.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. and select space Plenum 212P. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and zone information. select School or University. enter 03101. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.rvt. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. you verified building.Space Plan. for Energy Data. click Training Files. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. On the Place tab. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Value field. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. NH. for City. verify that Manchester. For Postal Code. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and verify that the space has replaced the void. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. double-click Level 2 . space. under Energy Analysis.

For People. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Occupiable is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Ground Plane. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ft. verify that <Building> is specified. For Building Construction. Click OK twice. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. click Edit. For Sensible. For Sliver Space Tolerance. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Values. If. for Values. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Level 1 is selected. and enter 50 sq. For Export Complexity. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that New Construction is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you need to select this option. In order to select a space. enter 150 Btu/h. and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. select Library . 8 In the drawing area. select Specified. for Building Service. select space Library 219. Under Heat Gain (per Person). a cooling load. verify that 1' 0" is specified. click in the Value column. and click Element Properties. enter 200 Btu/h. or neither. For Space Type. select Specified.Audio Visual. For Condition Type. right-click. under Volume Computations. and then click . and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ On the Weather tab. For Latent. Select Area per person. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Project Phase. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Heated and cooled. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. both.

you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You should correct the space error in the building model. 12 Click the Details tab. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that <Building> is specified. and click OK. Click OK twice. and click to learn the cause for the warning. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. is specified. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Under Power. For Building Construction. verify that School or University is selected. click Information). If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Manchester. select Actual. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . select 219 Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and under Heating Information. click Edit. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select Actual. NH. for Values. There should be no warnings displayed. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. For Electrical Loads. click Calculate. and can be modified here. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Location. For Building Service.■ ■ ■ Click OK. You have verified the building information. Next.

you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. select HVAC Zones. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 16 After you review the loads report. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 21 Click OK.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. or zone information. 3 In the drawing area. and a loads report displays. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. space. 17 In the loads report. select 219 Library. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Review the loads report for project. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. space. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and zone information for the building model. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click Training Files. weather. under Energy Analysis. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. For Color Scheme.rvt. Click OK. or make any changes to the model. In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 19 In the drawing area. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend.5 Zoom in to the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. select Tonnage Range.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

you create a schedule for the supply air system project. for Select available fields from. For Phase. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select Spaces. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Select Schedule building components. For Name.Space Fill is the active view. click Training Files. enter Space Airflow Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New Construction. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the next exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select Spaces. Click OK. more category options are available.rvt.

the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. enter . Header. For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Type. Select Formula. select HVAC. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Airflow Delta. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.■ Under Available fields. select Level. select Not Between. select Air Flow. and then select Hidden field. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Formula. For Then by. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Fields dialog. and then click Conditional Format. ■ Click Calculated Value. Select Ascending. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. enter Airflow Delta. Click OK. and click OK. for Formula. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and Blank line. click (Browse). select Number. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. For Discipline. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. In the Calculated Value dialog.

Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the Color dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In this exercise. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and click OK. Click OK twice. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. verify that Show is highlighted. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In later exercises. Under Conditions to Use. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. For Background Color. a view opens that contains the selected space. ■ The schedule displays. click the color swatch. right-click to access schedule properties. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. select red. In the next lesson. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text.■ ■ ■ For Value. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. As you place the air terminals. Then. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. After system creation. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. In this lesson. you modify air terminal parameters. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. 79 .Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.rvt. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 3 In the ceiling view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and scroll to space 223. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.

15 On the Options Bar. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter. and press Enter. select the diffuser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. Also. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. for Flow. as shown. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor down. which in this case is the ceiling grid.Rectangular Face Round Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. and then select both Copy and Multiple. click Place on Face. type 12. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc to end the command. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. enter 425 CFM.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and select Supply Diffuser . the hosted elements are updated as well. The schedule updates with the new flow data.

As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers. select one of the diffusers. and then press Esc. 24 In the Open dialog.rfa. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Next. as shown. 22 In the drawing area. 25 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 27 Select Return Diffuser . click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Open. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. click Yes. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.

36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and click to select the lines. for Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 32 In the Project Browser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click OK. Level. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. under Other. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Strong Reference. click Yes.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. select one of the return diffusers. as shown.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and click OK. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. click the Level 1 line. ■ ■ For the end point. enter 9' 0"2750.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Press Esc. and click View ➤ Systems. However. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. When you highlight a space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . including energy analysis. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. the space crossing lines display. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . right-click the title. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. After creating the logical connection. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 15 Click Cancel. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. On the Options Bar. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Connect Into. and Flow value. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. review the Number of Elements. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . the number of elements is updated. As you add diffusers to systems. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 11 In the drawing area. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.

In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. Rename the system Next. and the system connects them. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. for Mark. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. the air terminals are the children. for System Name. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 22 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.17 Using the method learned previously. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. under Mechanical. 25 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 18 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In this exercise.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. select the upper left diffuser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. 5 On the Options Bar. select Network.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Also. click Training Files. 4 In the drawing area. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . A Generate Layout tab displays. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the Network type provides several solutions. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. which provides various layout tools. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.HVAC Plan. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In this case. for Solution Type. and display solution 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

enter 3'. For Offset. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. Select Branch. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Duct Type. you’ll get an error in a later step. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. as shown. For Flex Duct Type.Round. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2". click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct.11 Click Finish Layout.

press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. thus it is not part of the system. and click OK. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Color Scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. but not all values are used in this view. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. highlight a segment of the main duct. select By View. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. a disconnection exists. Usually. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and then click OK. The first time you press Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and click to select it. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Flow. fittings. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Values Displayed. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. If the entire network does not highlight. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select Duct Color Fill . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Velocity. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 26 Click OK. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.Airflow. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 20 In the drawing area. for Flow. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select the WSHP. for Schemes.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and on the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and press Enter. under Mechanical . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.

select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct. and then click to select it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. highlight a segment of the duct. and drag it to the right. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and select 16". Under Constraints. select Calculated Size Only. Select Restrict Height. The ductwork and fittings are updated. click Cancel. and enter . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select Only. for Branch Sizing. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.

Using this tool.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. and pressure loss. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. static pressure. pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Use the information that displays (flow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. so that you can modify the system design accordingly.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 35 Click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click to specify the end of the main duct.HVAC Plan . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view.

for Offset. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. select 9' 10 1/2". 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select the top right diffuser. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. NOTE When drawing duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.3D MEP. double-click MEP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Front. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the ViewCube. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

in space 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. it is considered a closed loop. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Also. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 25 Press Esc. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to select it. 30 Press Esc twice. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

and click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Mechanical . 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select a segment of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. such as a plenum.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. clear Restrict Height. for Flow.

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Automatically and manually lay out piping. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.

rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. you place mechanical equipment.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .High Efficiency .Design is highlighted. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . 7 On the Options Bar. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. in corridor 328.2-6 Tons . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and select WSHP . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Horizontal . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Left Return . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the top edge of the WSHP. and in the Type Selector. and enter 2'. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension.

above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.14 Click Modify. enter 9'. select the 2 WSHPs. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 12 GPM. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. for Water Flow. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. for Offset. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. where it is easier to review the information. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Creating a Piping System | 115 . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. but without a corresponding system.HVAC Plan . Unlike logical connections (systems).IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. analyses cannot be performed.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . indicating that it’s the active view. You can create pipes to connect system components.Design is highlighted.Mech 330). 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. right-click the Systems column heading. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Therefore. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. As you assign equipment to systems. This display indicates that the system is selected. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. select the boiler. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the 2 WSHPs. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Notice that on the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .In the System Browser. for System Name. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

HVAC Plan . enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.Design. and select the cooling tower. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.13 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Roof .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC . Creating a Piping System | 117 . You have created the hydronic return system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

and click Select. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. In cooling mode. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and bypasses the cooling tower. expand the Hydronic Return system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Expand All. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. and click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 23 Close the roof plan view.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 29 Right-click CHWS. The hydronic supply system highlights in red.

and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool.In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Properties. for Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 32 In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. and click OK. under Mechanical. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. expand Piping. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. you can view several parameters.

you can place the cursor over a system component. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. press Tab to highlight the system. select CHWR. select Mechanical Equipment. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Check None. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.rvt. When you draw a box to select components. the boiler. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). then the Select a System dialog displays.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the Filter dialog. 9 In the Select a System dialog.Mech 330). Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click to select it. A system preview displays in red. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click OK. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

For Inset. 13 Click Cancel.11 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that Solutions is selected. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select Perimeter. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. enter 1' 6''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. It does not reference the architecture. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. or architectural components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. click Settings.

16 Click Finish Layout. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the flow for one WSHP is 18. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times. and the flow for the other is 12. to display the path with thinner lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 17 Optionally. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

22 Select the boiler. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.

Design. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Number of Elements is now 8. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. click Edit System. Next. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Logically. double-click Level 1 . 27 On the System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you physically close the CHWR loop. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. access its instance properties. 38 Using the same method. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. select a WSHP. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. under Mechanical. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. 35 Using the drag control. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.

For Slope. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.40 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 0''/12''. enter 1' 6''. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. and then click OK. Click Settings. For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5.

46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

Add piping to close the supply loop. select a different layout solution. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. To create the piping system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or offset elevations are incorrect. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.50 Using the same method. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta. click Training Files. As you work in the training file. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. double-click 3D HVAC Building. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view.

click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and click OK. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. The connections are automatically created. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click Draw Pipe. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the 3D view. select the return pipe riser. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

In a plan view. and you select 1 connector. ■ Move the cursor down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2'. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. for Offset. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.7''. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and press Enter. enter 1' .

22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. and click OK. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. select the primary base mounted pump. as shown. and the appropriate fittings are created. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice. 19 In the plan view. and select it. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click to draw the pipe. 28 Press Esc.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

enter 4'. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 Press Esc. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously.

right-click the bottom control on the tee.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 9' 6''.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. you validate the flow through the system. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. You now have a closed loop system. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify.

the value is 0 GPM. 46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. right-click. 42 Click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The flow is being propagated through the piping. as shown. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 40 Click Cancel. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump.50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. for Cooling Water Flow. 44 In the 3D view. and click Element Properties.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.

and close the dialog. select the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i.50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and is heated by the boiler.

The bypass valve is closed by default. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Press Esc twice. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. as shown.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 4 On the Options Bar.

place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve.

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). verify that Flow is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . and click OK. In heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 19 Using the same method. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 20 Select the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. under Mechanical.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and click Element Properties. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .22 Using the method you just learned.rvt. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Initially. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Schemes.Size. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Pipe Color Fill .

10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Select And. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Click OK. and for Velocity. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 5 FPS. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Press Esc. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing. select Friction. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and enter 2. Under Constraints.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. pressure.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Using the System Inspector. Inspecting the System | 149 . select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or manually modify the pipe. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. click Training Files.rvt. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. as required. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. and pressure information including pressure loss.

inspect Section 6 again. as shown. 9 Using the same method.88 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F.67 psi. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. for Fluid Temperature.89 psi. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you need to validate them. 10 Click Finish. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.

and click Show to view all of the system components. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. After you assign components to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 9 Right-click CHWS. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed.rvt. and double-click Level 3 . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. thus assigning the components to a system. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click the Systems titlebar. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 6 In the Project Browser. and for pipe sizing. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). After you have assigned all components to systems. In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. double-click Level 1 . the pipe is associated with that system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Warnings display. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As you learned when placing components. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.Design. and click View. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.Design. 7 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. click Training Files.

otherwise. 12 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. click Close. 13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return. 14 Using the methods that you learned. expand the Unassigned folder. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Level 3 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and confirm unassigned system components.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.HVAC Plan . and click Expand All. 10 Using the same methods. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

Wire Sizes. select Copper.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK. click Training Files.rvt. select 90. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Temperature Rating. You also add a wiring type. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ For Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Material. wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.04. select Wiring Types. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. As you place components and create circuits. enter THHN. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Copper. and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter 1. select 75. expand Wiring . Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. In this exercise you review electrical settings. distribution systems. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. Click Background Color. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .■ ■ For Value.

using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. power circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. 167 . you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create power loads. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. First. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design.

select Average Estimated Illumination.rvt. for the Spaces Category. In the Color dialog. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 fc. You can create additional color schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Basic Colors. select the color legend. select Orange. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select the color for Less Than 20. click Training Files. Click OK. Under Scheme Definition. click (Open). 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.5 fc range is satisfied. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.7 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan.277. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The red field will clear once the +/.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range.

select Multiple. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 23 Click OK. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 19 Press ESC to end the command.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click to place the fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.

28 In the drawing area. 27 Press ESC to end the command. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple. select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures.277V. 36 In the Filter dialog. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . and for Category.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

41 On the Options Bar.277V. 42 In the drawing area. select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. click the ceiling grid line as shown. The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 2 Tile the views as shown.Lighting Color Fill plan. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219.Lighting Plan.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

■ Click OK twice. for Color Preset. Under Identity Data. enter 162. select T5 [HO]. enter . select Xenon and click OK. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. click the value for Initial Intensity.ies and click Open. Click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.277V and click OK. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics. for Apparent Load. enter F15. and click OK.85. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Under Electrical. ■ Click Apply.00 lm. for Lamp. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. In the Name dialog.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000.93. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Photometrics. for Type Mark. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. In the Select File dialog. select 463T5_S. select Luminous Flux. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .00 VA. Under Photometrics. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.

and for Category. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. click Check None. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.277V. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. select Lighting Fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

click (Open). click Training Files. Junction Boxes. Junction Boxes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.rvt. In the next exercise. Placing Switches. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you add switches. 2 In the drawing area.Press Delete. and receptacles to your design. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 . The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 Click to place the switch. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .277V.

11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. and Receptacles | 185 . The element type Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command.rfa and click Open.NoLoad.

zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click Edit Type. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. for Mark. In the Type Properties dialog. enter JB-1NL. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical.14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.Offset. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 21 In the drawing area. note the Number of Poles is 1. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Click OK twice. 15 Select the junction box. enter 9’0”.

NOTE If necessary. 24 For any column. Space Number. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Receptacles | 187 . 23 In the System Browser. right-click and click Column Settings. Junction Boxes. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand General. Distribution System. Click OK. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Voltage. and Number of Elements. Expand Electrical. Select Size.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle.

42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.rvt. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area.equipment. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. click Training Files. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).

Surface: 100A. 9 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. for Max. 8 Select the panelboard.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . enter 20. 15 On the Options Bar. Click OK. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers.

The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. #1 Pole Breakers. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Max. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. For Panel Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. and for Category. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. enter 20.Loads. 20 In the drawing area. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter LP-2B. Click OK.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 23 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. zoom to space Instruction 221.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.

35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors. Next you create circuits without showing wire. and for Category. except without wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Loads. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. click Check None. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 2. Click OK. click (Open). 41 In the Filter dialog. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. right-click on the Systems heading. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand Power. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Voltage. and then expand circuit 1. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. 13 In the System Browser. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Click OK. Distribution System. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files. and Voltage Drop are selected. and verify that Load. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. Expand Electrical. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 30 Close the System Browser. Click OK. under Electrical. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click below the first one to place it. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice. enter FR4. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click Edit Type. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Tags. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 35 Press ESC to end the command. under Identity Data.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Yes. 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK.

48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click Save. Click OK. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for File Name. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Check None. Deselect Break and for Suffix. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 56 In the Filter dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the tag is updated in the drawing area.rfa. and for Category. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter a comma. Next you create a switch system. Click OK. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. For Circuit Number. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.

9 Select the occupancy sensor. click Training Files.rvt. Creating a Switch System | 205 . for Switch ID. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). under Electrical Lighting. enter a.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

Lighting. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b. for switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK.

The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. lighting. and for Category. select Electrical Fixtures. 2 In the drawing area.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. select the PP-2B panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click Check None. 4 In the Filter dialog. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Next you create a circuit and size wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Circuits are used for power. click Training Files. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors.rfa. 19 Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. select Long Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click Open. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. and click Element Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter 2. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical . and in the drawing area. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 13 Select the wire again. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click to select the circuit. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown.26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 In the drawing area. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 3 In the Electrical space.rvt. select panel LP-2B. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Finally. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 2 In the drawing area.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Open. zoom to space Electrical 220. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Training Files.

while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Scroll down. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. enter 30A. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and Phase C . Click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 12 Select panel PP-2B. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3616 VA). B. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 6 Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#10. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.3712 VA. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Phase B 3636 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 1-#10. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#12.

click (Open).rvt. Click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Training Files. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. for Rating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. enter 25A. under Electrical . Select PP-2B. and click OK. enter 30A. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. under Electrical . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.15 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . and click OK. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. for Rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.

click Training Files. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. under Other.Panel Schedules. Under Body Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 1/8. Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Font. for Appearance. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 4 Close the report. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. expand Sheets (all). enter 3/32.rvt. and open E601 . for Font Size. select Berlin Sans FB. for Font Size. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. select Bold and Italic. click (Open). This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click Edit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 7 Select the schedule.

In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. select space Lounge 212. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. press TAB once. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Unassigned. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall.

select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. zoom to space Electrical 214. 16 Close the details dialog. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 17 In the drawing area. 18 Select panel LP-2C. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

planning is critical to a successful design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. type PVC . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Sanitary. click Duplicate. 4 In the Name dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 219 . Adding a pipe size. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type.Design is open. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . and click Properties. click Training Files. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and click OK. right-click PVC .Vent. In this lesson.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.rvt. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.

select None. 27 For the new pipe size. 10 On the Selection panel. select Branch. click Pipe Settings. 21 In the right pane.Sch 40 . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter 10°. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter 27/32''. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 1/2''. and click OK. select Tee Vent . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 26 Click OK. for Nominal. enter 5/8''. PVC . 15 For System Type. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV: Standard.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify.rfa. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. for Material. select Tee. For Offset. 25 For Outside. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 6 Click OK. Tap. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.0''. select Sanitary. under Pipe Types. select Plastic. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . Tee. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.DWV: Standard. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter -4' . 17 In the left pane.Vent is listed.PVC . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click Main.PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 18 For System Type. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Cross. under Mechanical.DWV. 22 Click New Size. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 24 For Inside Diameter. select Sanitary.Sch 40 .PVC . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. 13 In the right panel.Sch 40 . 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. vent. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. 221 . add a hot water heater. and hot and cold water piping. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures.

and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. including the men’s room (space Male 107). In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 1 urinal. and verify that Level 1 . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. as shown. you add 2 toilets.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open.rvt. click Training Files.

in the Type Selector. select Public . 5 On the Placement panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal.Wall Mounted. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.6 gpf. 4 On the Element panel.1. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. and 3 sinks. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Flush Valve . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown. against the left wall. under Water Closet .

10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. above the first in the standard toilet space.) 8 Press Esc.Wall Hung. zoom in closer. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. and press Esc. under Urinal . use the reference line to center the fixture. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet.

In placing the fixture.2'' Drain. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. click Place on Face. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Rectangular. 14 Click Modify. under Floor Drain . 12 On the Placement panel.

17 If all disciplines are displayed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. a urinal. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Default Domestic Cold Water. right-click in the System Browser table heading.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and review the components listed under this system. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. In this exercise. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. and click View ➤ Piping. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. clear Lines (<Overhead>). verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 8 In the Filter dialog. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .

and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 11 On the Options Bar. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 On the Edit System panel. so the Create Sanitary System is available. If you deselected the drain.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. enter Sanitary 107. for System Name. 13 In the Systems Browser. You include the bathroom space number in the name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary. click Finish Editing System.

at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base is placed. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select Sanitary 107. select one of the components in the system. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. a toilet.

You accept this suggested solution. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. select 4''.19 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Main. for Slope. and click Settings. 21 On Options Bar. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Solution Type. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -1' 0''. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and for Offset. and modify it to meet project requirements. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Intersections. select Branch. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. The default settings are automatically modified. 25 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Diameter. enter -1' 0''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. for Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter -4'-0”.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

select 22''x22'' . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Rectangular. and verify that Level 1 . under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Public.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. in the Type Selector. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.

For example. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. TIP When entering dimensions. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. enter 2' 4''.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Add To System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 16 On the Edit System panel. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . double-click 3D Plumbing. with the tee fitting selected. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. 21 Select the tee.In the System Browser. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 22 In the plan view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).

enter 2' . 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope. for Offset. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click Apply. When you press the Spacebar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.6''. In this example. 27 Click Modify. press Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click to draw the pipe.

and when the vertical center line displays. 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV.PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting.

enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. enter 1'. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. right-click the right connector. for Offset.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

and press Esc. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. enter 6''. 46 In the section view. right-click the bottom connector. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.

You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV.Sch 40 . 51 In the Type Selector. 53 Using the same method. 55 In the 3D view. select the P-Trap on the left. 54 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select Standard. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.PVC . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 52 In the plan view. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. under Trap P .

right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 58 Using the same method. In the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. select the left P-Trap. enter 6''. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector.■ In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the section of pipe you just drew.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Finish. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Training Files. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 62 On the Options Bar. adjusting the sanitary stack. and verify the slope. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Plumbing Plan . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design. 9 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the tee.Overall. 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. and click to draw the pipe.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Pipe. 3 In the Section view.Floor level line. select the elbow fitting on the right.PVC . select the vertical stack. select Standard.Sch 40 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . click Modify.Design. right-click the top connector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .DWV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

PVC . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. as shown. 12 Select the fitting.11 Click Modify. for Offset. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Plug . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 17 In the Type Selector. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 13 Click the rotate control once.DWV. enter 1'-0”. 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc.Sch 40 . 14 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. click Training Files.rvt. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.19 Click Modify.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.

and sinks. for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.Overall. select Pipe Types: Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. double-click 3D Plumbing . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset.) 10 Click OK. select Main. For Offset. for System Type. click Check None. and click Main. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. select Domestic Cold Water. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 17 In the Filter dialog. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Domestic Hot Water. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . if necessary. expand Unassigned. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. draw a selection box to select the toilets. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. urinal. 4 In the right pane. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 In the System Browser. 15 In the plan view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and for System Type. select Branch. 6 In the left pane.Design ➤ 3D Views. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. enter 9' 3''. select Branch. and click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Pipe Types: Water. minimize the Sanitary system. 9 In the left pane. 7 In the left pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system.

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. For Flow Conversion Method. 19 On the System Tools panel. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. enter DCW 107. In the System Browser. 21 On the Edit System panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Finish Editing System. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Notice that the water main displays in blue. click Edit System.

For Slope. and click to place the pipe. right-click the top DCW connector. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . at the intersection of the water main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. and press Enter. click to the left of the urinal. and press Enter. under Pipe Types. 32 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. enter 4'0”. 35 In the Type Selector. and click the connector. 30 In the plan view.25 Using the same method. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 7''. enter 0”/12”. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 3' . 33 Click Modify. as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 10'. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. select the sink above the urinal.2 7/8''. select 3/4''. 28 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. connect the second toilet. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 34 In the plan view. select Water. 31 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. For Offset. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK.39 Move the cursor to the left. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 41 Select the top sink.

45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. you create the hot water system. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser. 6 In the plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. while pressing Ctrl.Plumbing Plan . select the 3 sinks. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design is open. expand the Unassigned folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.rvt.Overall. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 .

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. you edit the system to add equipment. under Water Heater . 15 In the System Browser.Tankless. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 Click Modify. 10 In the System Browser. for System Name. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Domestic Cold Water.6 Gallon. 13 In the plan view.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Default Domestic Hot Water. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the Type Selector. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. and click Edit System. In later steps. When designing systems. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. select 0. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. as shown. and click OK. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). in the Unassigned folder. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.

verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 25 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 24 Move the cursor up. for Offset. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and press Enter. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. Offset: 4' 6''. enter 10’. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 22 In the Type Selector. enter 1' 6''. select the water heater. and click the water main line. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 19 Select the water heater. and on the Edit System panel. and select Draw Pipe.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. click Finish Editing System. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. right-click the middle left connector.

37 On the Options Bar. as shown. select a sink. 30 On the System Tools panel. enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 35 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. for Diameter. for Offset. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 38 Move the cursor to the right. and for Offset. and in the System Selector. click Finish Editing System. select 4'-6''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and on the Placement Tools panel. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 36 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Edit System. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 33 On the Edit System panel. enter 9' 0''. enter 1' 6''.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. After finishing each exercise. and click Duplicate. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.rvt. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 2 Right-click Standard. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. However. you can choose to save your work. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 267 . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. go to http://www. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. You create a new pipe type. In this lesson. click Training Files.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.

for Material. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 9 Click OK. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For System Type. under Mechanical. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you modify the type properties of the pipe. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and click Properties. structural beams. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and then click OK. For Offset. duct. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Main. and enter Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Rename. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. In the next exercise. Next. or architectural components. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For System Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. verify that 9' 0" is selected. For Offset. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Pipe Type. select Carbon Steel. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. However. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems.

right-click.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Fire Protection. Under Categories. For Group parameter under.rvt. enter Sprinkler Zone. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Zone 1.Fire Protection Plan . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. for Name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. 8 Using a crossing window. click Training Files. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 5 Click OK twice. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Design is highlighted. click Add. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. and then click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and click Element Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. the space crossing lines display. select the upper half of the building. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . under Fire Protection.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then access instance properties. under Fire Protection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. including a calculated value parameter. and click OK. enter Zone 2. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. to which you add various parameters. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection.rvt. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog.

Design is highlighted. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 6 Using the same method. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. Click OK. For Group parameter under. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Feet and fractional inches. Select Schedule keys. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Field Format. for Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select Length. For Rounding.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the new header. enter Protection Area Construction Type. click the Formatting tab. In the Maximum Spacing column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Light. select Fire Protection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . For Name. 10 In the Format dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click Add Parameter. enter Maximum Spacing. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Maximum Spacing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 11 Click OK twice.Fire Protection Plan . 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Obstructed-Combustible. For Key name. 7 Click OK. select Spaces. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1'. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Units. double-click on each column separator. and on the ribbon. enter 15. The schedule displays.

enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. enter 130. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. under Available fields. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.

under Other. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. In the Fields dialog. and click View Properties. select Common. click Edit.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. click . In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Minimum Sprinklers. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Header and Blank line. For Units. 22 Click OK twice. For Formula. For Discipline. select Sprinkler Zone. and click Field Format. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Area. For Rounding. select Fixed. select Level. select Number. For Type. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 20 On the Formatting tab. for Sort by. and click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Click OK. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select 0 decimal place. enter Minimum Sprinklers.

select Sprinkler Zone. 27 In the drawing area. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting. For Then by (second instance). and then select Hidden field. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level. click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter by.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and click View Properties. select Number. For Fields. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter. and then click Field Format. ■ In the Format dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. and select Totals only. For Fields.

select Grand totals. and Count. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Calculate totals. and select Totals only. under Other. select Count. On the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. System Name. for Fields. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Embedded Schedule. double-click Type. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Under Field formatting. select Sprinklers. delete the word Maximum.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . For Category. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Available fields. for Embedded Schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.

40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. As a result. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Unobstructed. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 48 In the floor plan. and access the instance properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. double-click FP . 52 Click OK. 43 Click Cancel. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 44 In the schedule. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. select space 221 Instruction. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. but their values are not determined. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). under Identity Data. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Ordinary. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select Light. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 41 In the plan view.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

you can choose to save your work. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 279 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will understand the process. click Training Files. After finishing each exercise. At the end of this tutorial. As you place the sprinklers.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. go to http://www. and double-click Level 2 . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.autodesk. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system. methodology. If the tutorial training files are not present. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. By following the recommended workflow. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.rvt.

This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. After placing the initial sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the Project Browser. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and click to place 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 9 In space Instruction 202. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.Pendent . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. select the sprinklers that you placed. while pressing Ctrl. and select Sprinkler . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.

12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that Constrain is cleared. Next. and then press Esc. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.

open Design ➤ FP . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Fire Protection Plan . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 200B. 19 In the floor plan. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 25 Click OK. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down.FP_Ceiling view. you adjust the offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and press Enter. enter 14' 6". it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 10' 6". 18 Type WT.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. specify a vertical offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Notice that the schedule updates. for Offset. This number is determined in the schedule. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and click Element Properties. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. enter 11. and 200C). under Constraints. move the cursor to the right. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next. For Number.

you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Unlike logical connections (systems).30 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.rvt. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and with piping (physical connection). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Fire Protection Plan . In this exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. indicating that it’s the active view. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). In the next exercise.Design is highlighted. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. In the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 5 Right-click the header. named Fire Protection Wet. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. click View ➤ Systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and select Piping. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 .

Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Offset. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. For Pipe Type. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that 9' 0" is specified. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and on the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Next. 11 With the system still selected. 13 In the System Browser. press Tab. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. The Edit Piping System panel displays. and select the system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select an initial piping layout. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 14 Click Finish Editing System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. select Branch. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. place the cursor over a sprinkler. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. and number of elements in the system. 15 In the drawing area.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.Wet is selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and click Select. system equipment. In the left pane. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for System Name. click Settings. and a piping layout preview displays. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Main is selected.

these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type.20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. click Place Base. select 2". 23 For Offset. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . as shown. and select solution 5. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. click Solutions. When the layout is finished. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. verify that Network is selected. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. A (parallel movement control) displays. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. the Connect Into tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. select a different layout solution. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 32 If necessary. Next. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and select the elbow fitting as shown. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.rvt. 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 13 Click Finish Layout. mechanical equipment. verify that Network is selected. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 12 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. verify that Solutions is selected. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 5 In the drawing area. click Add To System. and select solution 5. radiators. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. and so on) are logically connected by a system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and pipe or duct is created. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. for Solution Type. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 9 On the Edit System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. or a system component to display system tools. air terminals. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

for Offset. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views. and then press Esc. 25 Select the sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Piping Plan. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 28 In the drawing area. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 In the Piping Plan. right-click.20 Open Design ➤ FP . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Using the same method.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and click Draw Pipe. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. select 9'.

zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

4 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. double-click on the section head to open the section view. for Scale. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. select 1/4" = 1'-0". and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. ■ 6 Press Esc. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.rvt. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. select 4".21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

25 On the Options Bar. as shown. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 26 Using the same method. The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown.

You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. you created a wet fire protection system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. You added tags to pipes. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

305 . create details. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the view included detail graphics. 307 . click Training Files. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and view references. right-click Copy of Level 1. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Floor Plans. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and apply a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. matchlines. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click Training Files. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 4 Using the same method. and click Apply Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. create dependent views for areas B and C. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. views and put them on the sheet. and click Rename. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and then press Esc. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 In the drawing area. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click OK. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 9 Click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. more focused. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK.

17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 19 In the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color./ ---). For Line Weight. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. 13 Press Esc twice. for Target view. select black. select Double Dash 5/8". Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and click OK. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click the current value. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . In the Color dialog. on the Options Bar. select 11. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 20 Select the upper view reference and. For Line Pattern.

as shown. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and zoom to each of the view references. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 27 Using the same method. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Domestic Water. The section crop lines no longer display. select Documentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. click Training Files. and select the section box. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. For Sub-Discipline. Click OK. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 3D Plumbing. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 2 Zoom in. for View Classification. select Plumbing. Under Graphics.29 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plumbing Isometric. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and click to select it. for View Name. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and click Apply Default View Template. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric .

press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click OK. and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". Click Apply. select 3. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select Dash. 12 Using the same method.

14 Right-click.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown).

and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing.15 Press Esc. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. press Tab 3 times. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and click to select it. Right-click. In the drawing area. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

25 Press Esc twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Creating Callout Views | 315 . for Rounding. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. as shown. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and click to place the spot slope annotation. click on the Format value. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Common is selected. In the Format dialog. 21 Click OK twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. select To the nearest 1/8".

316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. for Scale.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). indicating that it’s the active view. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

double-click M601 . for Line Weight. under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. using the same method.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Title on Sheet. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. and select the viewport. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Default View Template. Click OK.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

under Names. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 29 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. and click Rename. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Apply View Template.

symbols. and annotation to create a legend. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. ■ work with model-based components. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . duct tags.

Creating Annotations In this exercise. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.rvt. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. as shown. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. a return diffuser. Creating Annotations | 323 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.9 Press Esc twice. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 On the Options Bar.

17 Click Modify. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. for Ducts. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. clear Leader. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 22 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 20 In the Tags dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. If necessary. and click OK. under Category. and click Open. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.25 In the drawing area. and Attached End. Creating Annotations | 325 . 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 26 On the Options Bar. as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 31 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. Leader. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.

33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. 34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. for Leader.

Creating Dimensions | 327 . select Dot Open 1/16". and click OK. select the last tag placed. lay out. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.36 Press Esc twice. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 37 In the drawing area.

2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. indicating that it’s the active view. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.rvt. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. and then select the interior face of the wall. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 12 Press Esc. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 16 Press Esc.3 1/2"). lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. annotation symbols. and offset them 8' from the wall. 19 Using the same methods. Because the dimensions are locked. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. enter 8'. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes.13 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . click the 3 interior locks on the line. and press Enter. linework. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Creating a Legend | 329 .

select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt. click below the title to place the diffuser. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.8 Neck. For View. 5 Click in the drawing area. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . For Scale. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Using the same method. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select 1/4" = 1' -0". Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. ■ 9 In the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Training Files. select Floor Plan.

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating a Legend | 331 . annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click next to the top diffuser.

28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 26 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The selected detail lines are now thin. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP and its text note. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Legend | 333 .30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected.

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and text. indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. click Training Files. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. detail groups. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 335 .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. clear Leader. Next. 4 On the Options Bar. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser . 7 Drag the Power Riser . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select each of the 2 panelboards.113 East on the sheet. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 8 Using the same method. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.

and click OK. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc. and click Activate View. right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click.

21 Using the drag control.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the 113 East elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. In the next exercise. 22 Press Esc. and click Activate View. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. you add wiring to the diagram. as shown. right-click.

Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. In the Line Styles dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Close the Project Browser. Under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. enter Electrical Power.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. expand Lines. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . for Line Weight. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click OK. click New. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the New Subcategory dialog. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).113 North view. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar. As you draw. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. select 6. notice that there are no snaps active. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Chain is selected. as shown. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.rvt.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. as shown.10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 28 Click above the cap. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.

38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.5.36 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and press Enter. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and then press Esc. enter 3/32". Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 0 0. 40 Press Esc.

44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. and then press Esc. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. for Name. Using the same method. 50 With the group selected. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and press Enter. and click OK. select all 3 lines. 46 In the Project Browser. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. expand Groups ➤ Detail.25. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. enter Ground. click on the length dimension value.125. while pressing Ctrl. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.

55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 54 Select the group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .

you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click Rename. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 5 Zoom in to view the section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click OK. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and will place it on sheet E01. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. for Name. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). click Training Files. 2 Right-click the copy. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.rvt.

click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge. Back. and then press Esc.6 Select the section box. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top.

9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click. select 3D HVAC Iso. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Apply View Template. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Under Names. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Walkthroughs.

14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left. Typical. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. (Right).

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.To rotate and reposition a text label. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. 25 Click OK. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.29 In the drawing area. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Project Browser. select 3" = 1'-0". click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. select the isometric view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click Properties. Place a detail component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. right-click the view name. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. For Scale. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use detail lines to create a detail group.

Click OK. as shown. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. For View Classification. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. as the rectangle start point. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). click the point at the top of the drain. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Documentation. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Concrete. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and click OK. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and then press Esc. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. select the filled region. (Line).P. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 21 In the drawing area. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select C.I. for Type. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 18 With the filled region still selected. 22 Click Modify. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click to select them. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

45 Using the method learned previously. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Click Finish Region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. as shown.

enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing ..D. press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and then click to select them. draw wide detail lines as shown. and click OK. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. for Name. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 49 Click Modify.

add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown.

71 Click Modify. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 72 If necessary. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. and use the grips to resize the masking region. and then click OK. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 80 Press Esc twice. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Colors. Click OK. you import a CAD detail drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For A-----NPP. click Training Files. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Black and White. Click Open. For Import units. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser.dwg. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select 3. For Layers.rvt. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. select Visible.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight.

11 Press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. select the viewport title. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful